Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneGW620

ELECTRONICS INC.

GW620

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﳌﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

GW620

User Guide

GW620

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

P/N : MMBB0359313 (1.2) H P/N : MMBB0359313 (1.2) H

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ENGLISH

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

Summary of content (202 pages)

PAGE 1
ENGLISH GW620 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ELECTRONICS INC. P/N : MMBB0359313 (1.2) H GW620 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ENGLISH ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ GW620 User Guide P/N : MMBB0359313 (1.
PAGE 2
Bluetooth QD ID B015891
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ّ‬ ‫ﻷﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ GW620‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ،LG‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤّﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ‪7..........‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪9............‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪11 ........‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪14.............................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪15.............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪17............‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪17....................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪17..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺒﻠﻎ ‪18......................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪18...............................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪19..............
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ‪46...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺣﻚ‪46..................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪46....................SMS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪47................... MMS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪47.................‬‬ ‫‪48.................................... SNS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ‪49............................Moxier‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪50.........................Moxier‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪51....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪51...............‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪52..............
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪66.........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪74......................Google‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ‪67..........‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‪67....................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪67.............................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪67...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪67...........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪67......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪68.......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ) ‪68.. (Media Player‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ‪68........................
PAGE 8
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪82.......................... SIM‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪82.......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪82.....................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪83..............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪83...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪83............................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪83...............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪83....................DivX VOD‬‬ ‫‪84....................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪86..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪87...............
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲء ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪(USB‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪ | LG GW620‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ ،USB‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪9‬‬
PAGE 12
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼ ّﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺃﻧﺰﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ .SIM‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬ﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.
PAGE 15
‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ .GW620‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ‪ GW620‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪ | LG GW620‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟـ ‪ GW620‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺮﺑﺸﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ SD‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .
PAGE 18
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻼ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ًﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪.SD‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ًﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎً ﺟﻴﺪﺍً ﻟﺘﻌﺘﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺒﻠﻎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺟﺰء ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ WiFi‬ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ GW620‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪ GW620‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺭﻣﺰﺍً ﻓﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺭﻣﺰﺍً ﻭﺍﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺭﻣﺰﺍً ﻭﺍﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ِ :‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﻯ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺮﻯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ‪ Google‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SMS‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ MMS‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﻓﺮﺯ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ) ‪(Media Player‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Quickoffice‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪﻙ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ‪ Google‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ‪ ،Google‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ IM‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Googles‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ‪ Java‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯﺍً‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺄﻥ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﻄﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪31‬‬
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ +‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ ،Qwerty‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - Bluetooth‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DTMF‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪ DTMF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺘﺔ‪DTMF .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎً ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮّﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﻭﺟﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻢ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪ | LG GW620‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ GW620‬ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،SIM‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GW620‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SMS‬ﻭ‪ MMS‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ً‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Français‬ﺛﻢ ُﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.T9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪LG IME‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ( ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ّ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪.qwerty‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ‪T9‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،T9‬ﺳﺘﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ T9‬ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺳﺎً ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ‪3 ،6 ،6 ،4 ،7 ،3 ،5 ،3 ،8‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ’‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪LG IME‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ @‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎً‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.(ä :‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪،Qwerty Keypad‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ”‪ ،“ä‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ”‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻭﺩﻭّﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ِ 2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻧﺸﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺣﻚ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ‪ -‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ SMTP‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ‪ -‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪MMS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫‪ّ GW620‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪SNS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .GW620‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪Facebook‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ SNS‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Facebook‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Bebo‬ﻭ‪.Twitter‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺮﻯ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﻳﻘﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﻯ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Facebook‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ‪Moxier‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ‪ Moxier‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻟـ ‪ ™Android‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪Microsoft® Exchange‬‬ ‫‪ ®ActiveSync‬ﻣﻊ ‪Exchange‬‬ ‫‪ server 2003‬ﻭ‪.2007‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ ،SSL‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ HTML‬ﻣﻊ ‪Microsoft® Exchange‬‬ ‫‪server 2007‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺘﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﺮﺩﻙ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Moxier‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Moxier‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.Exchange‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪،SMS‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ‪Moxier‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺧﺮﺓ )ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ -‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 54‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺻﻮّﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮّﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ـ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ـ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺍً ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪ y‬ﺑﻼ ‪ -‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍً‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍً‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ‪5) .
PAGE 59
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 59‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.59‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .
PAGE 60
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺻﻮّﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ًﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ REC‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮّﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 62
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍً‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ - 320x240‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻴﺌﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺑﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ -‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺿﻔﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻴّﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻢ ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻢ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ‪ GW620‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )‬ ‫‪ ،(Media Player‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛـ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻋﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪ -‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ّ ،‬‬‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬‫‪ - 25/32‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ qwerty‬ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ‪ Java‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻀﻤّﻨﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ LG GW620‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ـ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﻢ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ً Google‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.GW620‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ‪ GW620‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪.GPRS/3G‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ‪ Google‬ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ِ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻳﻦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﺎً‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒّﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪GW620‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪Quickoffice‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ‪ pdf‬ﻭ‪ doc‬ﻭ‪ txt‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ xls‬ﻭ‪.zip‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎً ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺘﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻮﻝ‪ .
PAGE 80
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻳﺼﻠﻚ ﺑﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ‪ -‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ -‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺺ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺳﻬﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎً ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺗﺒﻌﻪ ﺑـ ‪.URL‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ - Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ - Bluetooth‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ - Bluetooth‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‪ّ ،‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻋﻄﺎء ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ -SD‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎء ﻣﺘﻴﻘﻈﺎً‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ - USB‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ - SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻓﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SD‬ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Wi- Fi‬ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﻭﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ GW620 :‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪WEP‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ .WPA-PSK/2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‪ .
PAGE 87
‫‪ (2‬ﺇﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎً ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﻳﺴﻬّﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫‪ ،DHCP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺻﻒ ﻛﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺮﻑ(‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ّ SSID :‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﻋﻢ ‪WEP، WPA-‬‬ ‫‪.PSK/2‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪http://‬‬ ‫‪.update.lgmobile.com‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪GW620‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪.GW620‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪GW620‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪DivX VOD‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪.DivX VOD‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ >‪
PAGE 91
LG Electronics Inc. LG Twin Towers 20, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, Korea 150-721 GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GW620 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-01 V1.6.1, EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1, EN 301 489-19 V1.2.1, EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1, EN 300 328 V1.7.
PAGE 92
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﺧﻄﺮﺍً‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ّ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )‪ .(SAR‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪GW620‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲء‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ّ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺄﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ .
PAGE 96
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .
PAGE 97
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪GSM‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ .
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺟﻬﺪ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪.
PAGE 99
Some of the contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider. This handset is not recommended for blind disability person due to touch screen keypad.
PAGE 100
Co Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact GW620 phone by LG, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology.
PAGE 101
Contents y y. Getting to know your phone ...7 Calls ........................................... 32 Making a call .................................32 Open view ...................................9 Calling your contacts .................32 Installing the SIM and Answering and rejecting a call ..32 battery ................................... 11 In-call options ...............................33 Charging your phone............. 14 Adjusting call volume ................34 Memory card ...........................
PAGE 102
Contents Setting up your email ................43 Sending an email using your new account..................................44 Retrieving your email.................44 Changing your email settings ...44 Threaded box ................................45 Using smiley ..................................46 Changing your SMS settings ...46 Changing your MMS settings..46 Changing your other settings ...47 SNS ...................................................47 Moxier Mail ....................................
PAGE 103
58 .58 .59 .59 .60 .60 .61 .62 .62 63 .63 .63 .63 .63 .63 .64 .64 .65 .65 .65 .66 Adding clipart ...............................66 Using drawpad .............................66 Adding stamp ...............................66 Resizing ...........................................66 Editing your videos .....................66 Trimming the length of the video ................................................67 Selecting Transition style..........67 Adding a subtitle .........................
PAGE 104
Contents The web .................................... 84 Browser ...........................................84 Accessing the web ......................84 Using web tool bar......................84 Using options................................85 Adding and accessing bookmarks .....................................85 Changing web browser settings............................................86 Ge Wi-Fi .......................................... 90 Software Update..................... 92 Accessories.............
PAGE 105
Getting to know your phone 90 92 93 96 02 Stereo earphone connector Power /Lock key Turns the phone on/off. Earpiece Sensor window Back key • Press once to return to the previous screen. Menu key Press this key to check what options are available in that applications. Home Key Go to Home screen. WARNING: Putting a heavy object on the phone or sitting on it can damage its LCD and touch screen functionality. Do not cover the protection film on proximity sensor of LCD.
PAGE 106
Getting to know your phone O Charger, Data cable (USB cable) TIP: Before connecting the USB cable, wait until the phone has powered up and has registered on the network. Volume keys • When the screen is idle: key tone volume. • During a call: earpiece volume. • When playing a track: controls volume continuously. 8 LG GW620 | User Guide SD Card Cap SIM Music Key • Go to Music directly. Camera key • Go to the camera menu directly by pressing and holding the key.
PAGE 107
y.
PAGE 108
Open view In 1 U t t l Control key • Enters symbolic character or certain number Change the text input mode (capital/ small) Symbol key • Enters symbolic character 10 LG GW620 | User Guide Enter key Clear key • Clears a character each time it is pressed. Hold the key down to clear all input. Space key • Use to enter a space when editing.
PAGE 109
e Installing the SIM and battery 1 Remove the battery cover Use your thumbnail to open the battery release button on the bottom of the phone and lift off the battery cover. 2 Remove the battery Hold the top edge of the battery and lift it away from the battery compartment. WARNING: Do not remove the battery when the phone is switched on, as this may damage the phone.
PAGE 110
Installing the SIM and battery 3 Install the SIM card Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. To remove the SIM card, gently push it until it clicks. Gently pull it out.
PAGE 111
4 Install the battery Insert the top of the battery into the top edge of the battery compartment first. Ensure that the battery contacts align with the phone’s terminals. Press the bottom of the battery down until it clips into place.
PAGE 112
Charging your phone Slide back the cover of the charger connector on the side of your GW620. Insert the charger and plug it into a mains electricity socket. Your GW620 must be charged fully until you can see . NOTE: The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime. M NOTE: GW620 has an internal antenna. Be careful not to scratch or damage this rear part as it will cause loss of performance.
PAGE 113
Memory card Installing a memory card You can expand the available memory space on your phone by using a memory card. NOTE: A memory card is an optional accessory. Slide the memory card into the slot at the top, until it clicks into place. Make sure the gold contact area is facing downwards. WARNING: Slide into the memory card to the slot, otherwise, the card can be damaged. NOTE: You need to insert SD memory card to take photo and video. Photos and Videos only will be saved to SD Memory card.
PAGE 114
Memory card Yo Formatting the memory card Fro me the mu Your memory card may already be formatted. If it isn’t, you will need to format it before you can start to use it. NOTE: All files get deleted while formatting. 1 Select settings. 2 Scroll and touch SD card & phone storage. then scroll and select Format SD card. 3 Touch Format SD card and then confirm your choice. 4 Enter the password, if one has been set. The card will then be formatted and ready to use.
PAGE 115
Your home screen From this screen you can access menu options, make a call, view the status of your phone and much more. Touch screen tips The home screen is also a great place to get used to using the touch screen. To select an item, touch the centre of the icon. • Do not to press too hard; the touchscreen is sensitive enough to pick up on a light, firm touch. • Use the tip of your finger to touch the option you require. Be careful not to touch any other keys.
PAGE 116
Your home screen Flic Annunciator Touch and hold status bar part on the screen, drag down. At here you can check WiFi and Bluetooth status and other notifications. Flic Touch screen The controls on the GW620 touch screen change dynamically, depending on the task you are carrying out. On some screens, you can scroll up and down, or flick left to right.
PAGE 117
Flicking left & Right Opening Applications To open any Application, simply touch its icon. Proximity sensor Flicking up & Down When receiving and making calls, this sensor automatically turns the backlighting off and locks the touch keypad by sensing objects when the phone is near the ear. This makes the battery life last longer and prevents the touch keypad from malfunctioning through automatic key locking during calls.
PAGE 118
Your home screen Set default Home setting GW620 has Android Home and LG Home. You can set other Home as default setting. After you set a default Home screen, it will go back to the default one. whenever you touch If you want to change default home setting, choose Home screen selecter from menu. You To Fro be Fro Ho Set Home theme From Home screen, press Menu key and select Set Home theme. Choose from Default and Appet.
PAGE 119
You can add some icons on the Home screen. To add shortcuts on the Home screen, From Android Home : From menu, Long touch a icon and it will be added on the Home screen en From LG Home : From Menu, long touch a icon and draw it to . To remove newly added shortcuts from the . Home screen, long touch the icon and draw it to You can move icon to other group, simply touch and hold the icon and draw it to other group. Also you can change group name. Touch and hold the group name and enter new name.
PAGE 120
Your home screen Lon and op LG Home Quick keys The quick keys on your home screen provide easy, one-touch access to the functions you use the most. Touch to bring up the touch dialling pad, which lets you make a call. Enter the number and touch Call. Touch to access the Messaging menu. From here you can create a new SMS. 22 LG GW620 | User Guide Touch to open your contacts. To search for the number you want to call: Enter the name of the contact using the touchpad.
PAGE 121
Long click the home screen and you will see four available options You can add Shortcuts, Widgets, Folders or Wallpaper, on the Home screen. For example, select Folders and choose New folder. You will see a new folder on the Home screen. To delete it, long . touch the folder and draw it to If you select Wallpapers, you can set wallpaper from Gallery or Wallpaper gallery. e d NOTE: Android Home and LG Home provide this function.
PAGE 122
Your home screen Android Home Co You can use Google search on your homescreen Ico Touch , then you can see the whole menu.
PAGE 123
Communication Icon Description Touch to access Browser. Touch to open your contacts. You can also create new contacts and edit existing ones. Touch to bring up the touch dialling pad, which lets you make a call. Touch to access the Email menu. You can check your received Email and create new Email. Touch to keep and manage your favorite contacts. Touch to access the Message menu. From here you can create a new SMS or MMS. Easily check and manage your Social Network Communities.
PAGE 124
Your home screen Icon Description Touch to manage and options and settings for all Moxier Mail, Contacts, Calendar and Tasks. Multimedia Icon Description Touch to open your camera viewfinder. Touch to listen to the radio To collect, organise and sort picture and video files of a memory card. Touch to open Media Player Touch to enter the Music menu directly. Touch to edit your video files.
PAGE 125
r Utilities Icon Description Touch to access the Alarm menu directly Touch to perform basic arithmetic calculations such as addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. Touch to access Quickoffice. Touch to record voice memos or other audio files. Touch to choose your default Home setting. Touch to adjust General settings of your GW620.
PAGE 126
Your home screen Google Icon Do Description To keep track of your appointments and creates meeting requests. Use Google’s web-based email service on your phone. Touch to access Google maps, you can search locations and directions. Use Googles’ IM program and communicate with other people. Use online video streaming service that allows you to review videos uploaded by others.
PAGE 127
g Downloads At this category, newly installed applications will be added. Icon Description Touch to Install a Java game and application.
PAGE 128
Your home screen Viewing the status bar The status bar uses different icons to show conditions such as signal strength, new messages and battery life as well as whether Bluetooth or data connections is active. Below is a table which explains the meaning of icons you’re likely to see in the status bar.
PAGE 129
Icon Description Data in Data out Data in and out USB to PC Download Upload GPS is acquring GPS is on Service message Setting message 31
PAGE 130
Calls TIP! Press the power key to lock the touchscreen to prevent calls being made by mistake. Making a call 1 Touch to open the keypad. 2 Type in the number on the keypad. To delete a digit, press the backspace button. 3 Touch Call to make the call. 4 To end the call, touch End call. TIP! To enter + in order to make international calls hold down . On the Qwerty keypad, press and hold 0 key. Calling your contacts 1 Touch to open your Contacts.
PAGE 131
ist l d . In-call options - Touch to open a numerical keypad for typing in numbers, e.g. when dialling call centres or other automated telephone services. Swap calls : To change between the calls Merge calls : To merge two lines Add call : Choose to add another person to the call Transfer call : Connect the two calls online and quit the user’s call. Bluetooth - Call audio transfer to bluetooth Speaker - Touch to turn the speaker phone on.
PAGE 132
Calls Adjusting call volume To adjust the volume during a call, use the up and down button on the left side of the phone. Making a second call 1 During your initial call, press 2 3 4 5 6 34 . Menu key and touch Then, select the number you want to call. Call the number or search your contacts. Touch [Call] button to connect the call. Both calls will be displayed on the call screen. Your initial call will be locked and put on hold. Touch to toggle between calls. Or touch to make a conference call.
PAGE 133
is Call settings Using call barring Select Fixed dial number to turn on and compile a list of numbers which can be called from your phone. You’ll need your PIN2 code, which is available from your operator. Only numbers within the fixed dial list can be called from your phone. 1 Choose Settings. Choose Call Using call forwarding g. ed, 1 Choose Settings. Choose Call settings. 2 Touch Call forwarding.
PAGE 134
Calls Co Additional call setting Se 1 Choose Settings. Choose Call The a co Fro settings. 2 Touch Additional call settings. This lets you change the following settings: Caller ID - Use default operator settings to display my number in outgoing calls Call waiting - During a call, notify the user of incoming calls. Voice clarity - Remove noise and make reception clearer. Network operators Search networks and Select automatically.
PAGE 135
Contacts Searching for a contact Adding a new contact There are two ways to search for a contact: From the home screen 1 From the home screen, touch to open your Contacts. Touch Search contacts and enter the contact name using the key pad. 1 From the home screen, touch TIP! You can search by group by touching the Contacts tab at the top of the screen and selecting Groups. This will bring up a list of all your groups. From the main menu 1 Touch , then touch on the Communication tab.
PAGE 136
Contacts M 8 You can also add a Birthday 3 Touch Done to save the Me and a notes, Ringtone. 9 Touch Done to save the contact. group. NOTE: If you delete a group, the contacts assigned to that group will not be lost. They will remain in your contacts. You MM use The the Other contact options 1 TIP! You can create customised groups for your contacts. See Creating a group. Favorite Contacts You can assign a frequentlycalled contact. 1 From the home screen touch . Touch Add contact.
PAGE 137
he p in see act, e, . om s. f act, y it Messaging Messaging Your GW620 combines SMS, MMS into one intuitive, easy-touse menu. There are two ways of entering the messaging centre: 1 From the home screen, or , then touch scroll to Messaging on the Communication tab. Sending a message 1 Touch then New message to open a blank message. 2 Touch To to enter the recipient’s number, or open your contacts. You can add multiple contacts.
PAGE 138
Messaging Entering text Keypad. Use to scroll through the different keyboards in each text entry mode (e.g. capital or lower case letters). . To enter a space touch Show key mode Touch to turn on T9 predictive texting. Touch to change the writing language. Tap to change between the number, symbol and text keypads. Touch and hold then you will see Editor settings, Wrighting language, Input Method and User dictionary.
PAGE 139
xt wer ng d NOTE: If you changed LG IME setting, (Settings Locale & text - Text settings) this Show key mode is not available and you can only input special letter on the qwerty keypad. T9 predictive In T9 mode, you will see . T9 mode uses a built-in dictionary to recognise your words based on the key sequences you touch. Simply touch the number key associated with the letter you want to enter, and the dictionary will predict the word you want to use.
PAGE 140
Messaging You can pop up LG IME setting 1 Press once and press . twice 2 Or press continuously and press . and 3 Or press and hold press together You can pop up symbol pop up. 1 Press once and press . twice 2 Or press continuously and press . and 3 Or press and hold press together. 42 LG GW620 | User Guide You can input symbol on the key pad For example, to input @, 1 Press and press . 2 Or press twice continuously and press . and 3 Or press and hold press .
PAGE 141
d r , ut . When you input a letter with accent When you select French or Spanish as text entry language, you can input French or Spanish special character (ex : ä). From the Qwerty Keypad, in order to input special characters, press and hold the corresponding alphabet character key. After the corresponding alphabet character is removed, press the same key repetitively until you can see the special character you want to input. For example To input “ä”, press and hold “a” key.
PAGE 142
Messaging Sending an email using your 2 Touch the account you want to use then. new account 1 Touch Email on the Communication tab, then touch New message to open a new blank message. 2 Enter the recipient’s address and write your message. You can also attach images, videos, audio files and document file types. 3 Touch Send to send your email. TIP! During an active Wi-Fi connection, emails are sent and received via Wi-Fi.
PAGE 143
t r t r me g Email check frequency - Time interval to be check for new emails automatically. Truncate messages atdownloading options for retrieving. Number of email to display - number of email to be displayed in email list. Manimum receive size limit Maximum size can be downloaded. Maximum send size limit Maximun size can be sent out. Priority - setting email priority : High, Normal, Low. Signature - Create signature to be added on composing body.
PAGE 144
Messaging Using smiley Liven up your messages using smiley. When writing a new message, press Menu key and choose Insert smilely. Changing your SMS settings Your GW620 message settings are pre-defined, so you can send messages immediately. These settings can be changed based on your preferences. Touch and press Menu key. Delivery report - Activate to receive confirmation that your messages have been delivered. Manage SIM card messages - Manage messages stored on your SIM card.
PAGE 145
nd d y. est e ly. rity Creation mode RESTRICTED: In this mode, the MMS Client device shall only create and send messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain. WARNING: In this mode, the MMS Client device shall guide the user to create and send messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain. This guidance is implemented through warning dialogs. FREE: In this mode, the MMS Client may allow the user to add any content to the message.
PAGE 146
Messaging Home Log in and you will see your friend’s status update. Input your comment about new status or check others. Profile Press Menu key then you will see five options like Edit status, Upload Photo, Go to Facebook, Refresh and Info Details. You can upload the photo by touching Upload Photo. Choose from Camera or Gallery and input some comment. Friends You can see all your friends in SNS and view their Profile, Photo and Wall.
PAGE 147
an g. nt ol d h 07 ss rd. on. again, please contact your server administrator for more information. y Moxier Mail Moxier Mail provides convenient access to all exchange protocol features. You will see emails are organized in the timely manner. Press Menu key and use options you need. When you create a new message, search and enter recipients by using Global Address list (GAL) & Exchange Contacts/Google Contacts list. Go to Menu and add Cc/Bcc if necessary. Adjust priority or attach files.
PAGE 148
Messaging y Moxier Calendar Moxier Calendar enables 2way sync with the Exchange Calendar with New, Folders, Edit and Delete options. You can change the view mode or add a new event. When accepting the meeting invitation, it automatically adds the meeting as an event in the Event List. Ca y Legal notice Ge Check legal notice. y Help Takes you to the www. moxier.com FAQ website. y About Displays information on current Moxier Mail.
PAGE 149
Camera Getting to know the viewfinder Back - Touch here to return to the menu map. Camera mode - Shows whether the camera is in video or photo mode, and can also be used to take photos. Gallery - Touch this icon to view the gallery. Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on page 54 for details. Macro - Switch this on to take close up shots. Flash status - Set flash light mode to Auto, Always off or Always on. Exposure - See Adjusting the Exposure on page 53.
PAGE 150
Camera Taking a quick photo 1 Press and hold down the camera key on the right side of the phone. Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject you want to take a picture of. Press the capture button lightly and a focus box will appear in the centre of the viewfinder screen. Position the phone so you can see the photo subject in the focus box. When the focus box turns green, the camera has focused on your subject. Press the capture button and hold it down.
PAGE 151
ar oto , cur ge me ge . Touch to take another photo immediately. Your current photo will be saved. 4 The flash status icon in the Touch to view a gallery of your saved photos. Adjusting the exposure Using the flash The default flash setting is auto, but there are other options. 1 Select from the left side of the viewfinder to enter the flash sub-menu. 2 There are three flash options: Auto - Your camera will assess the light available for a good picture and use the flash as necessary.
PAGE 152
Camera Taking a continuous shot 1 From the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced settings options and select Shot mode and Continuous shot. 2 Position the subject in the viewfinder and press the capture button as if taking a normal photo. 3 The camera will take shots in quick succession. Using the advanced settings From the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced settings options. You can change the camera setting by scrolling the wheel. After selecting the option, touch the Back key.
PAGE 153
the he t, dy. mal . ou is , is d ISO - The ISO rating determines the sensitivity of the camera’s light sensor. The higher the ISO, the more sensitive the camera will be. This is useful in darker conditions when you can not use the flash. Select the ISO value from Auto, 100, 200 and 400. Scene mode - Choose from Auto, Portrait, Landscape, Sports and Night. Colour effect - Choose a colour tone to use on your new photo. Focus - Choose between Auto and Manual. Face - Select the way the camera will focus.
PAGE 154
Camera TIP! When you exit the camera all settings will return to their defaults, except image size and image quality. Any non-default settings will need to be reset, such as colour tone and ISO. Check these before you take your next photo. TIP! The settings menu is superimposed over the viewfinder, so when you change elements of the image colour or quality you will see a preview of the image change behind the settings menu.
PAGE 155
n s e a, A) Choosing a color effect Viewing your saved photos 1 Using the viewfinder, touch 1 You can access your saved in the top left corner. 2 Select Color effect from the Preview menu. 3 There are ten color tone options: Normal, Black & White, Sepia, Negative, Sketch, Emboss, Red, Green, Aqua and Solarize. 4 Once you’ve made your selection, the colour tone menu can be closed by selecting the Back key. You are then ready to take a picture. photos from within the camera mode.
PAGE 156
Video camera Getting to know the viewfinder Sh 1 Back - Touch here to return to the home screen. Start recording Gallery - Touch this icon to view the gallery. Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on page 60 for details. 2 T 3 T 4 5 6 Flash status - Set or turn off the flash. Exposure - See Adjusting the Exposure on page 60. Zoom - Zoom in or zoom out. TIP! You can close all shortcut options to give a clearer viewfinder screen.
PAGE 157
Shooting a quick video After shooting a video 1 Press and hold down the A still image representing your video will appear on the screen. Send Touch to send the photo as a Email, gmail, Messaging, My e-mail, YouTube and etc. n o g 2 3 4 5 6 7 camera key on the right side of the phone. Then, switch to . The video camera’s viewfinder will appear on the screen. Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject of the video. Press the capture button once to start recording.
PAGE 158
Video camera Touch to view the saved videos and pictures gallery. Adjusting the exposure The exposure defines the difference between light and dark areas in an image. A low contrast image will appear foggy, whereas a high contrast image will appear much sharper. 1 Touch . 2 Slide the exposure indicator along the bar, towards for a lower exposure and fuzzier image, or towards for a higher contrast and sharper image.
PAGE 159
ngs era ch ge ur rts ou ght Duration - Set a duration limit for your video. Choose between Normal and MMS to limit the maximum size to send as an MMS. TIP! If you choose MMS duration, choosing a lower image quality will enable you to shoot a longer video. Voice - Choose Mute to record a video without sound. Hide icons - Select whether to hide the icons on the camera menu automatically or manually. Reset - Reset all the video camera settings.
PAGE 160
Video camera Yo Choosing a color effect Watching your saved videos 1 Using the viewfinder, touch 1 In the viewfinder, touch . 2 Your gallery will appear on in the top left corner. 2 Select Colour effect from the Preview menu. 3 There are colour tone options, Normal, Black & White, Sepia, Negative, Sketch, Emboss, Red, Green, Aqua and Solarize. 4 Touch the colour tone you want to use.
PAGE 161
Your photos and videos os . g It Viewing your photos and videos 2 Touch the screen to open the 1 Touch 3 Touch Use as and touch Set on the camera preview screen. 2 Your gallery will appear on the screen. 3 Touch the video or photo to open it fully. TIP! Flick left or right to view other photos or videos. Using zoom when viewing a video or photo When viewing photos or videos, you can zoom in and out by .
PAGE 162
Your photos and videos Erase the editing you have done to the photo. Effect - Touch to apply the effect options to a photo. Frame - You can add frames on the the photo. Rotating your photo Text - Adding text on a picture. 1 Choose to rotate 90 CCW 2 Choose to rotate 90 CW 3 Choose to flip vertically Clipart - You can add some clipart on the photo. Drawpad - Draw something on your photo, freehand. Select the line thickness from the four options, then the colour you want to use.
PAGE 163
CW W y ch ech it Adding an effect to a photo Tuning your photo 1 From the editing screen, 1 From the editing screen, touch . 2 You can apply any of the various options to the photo 3 To undo an effect simply . touch touch . Use tuning toolbar and adjust your photo’s tuning as you like. Choose to adjust tue 1 tuning settings automatically. Choose to compare 2 Before & After tuning. Adjust brightness & 3 Contrast of the photo. Choose to adjust 4 highlights and shadows.
PAGE 164
Your photos and videos Adding Frame Adding stamp 1 From the editing screen, 1 Touch touch 2 Touch . or screen. to choose a frame. 3 Touch to check whole frame. Adding clipart 1 Touch from editing screen. and select a clipart. 2 Touch 3 Adjsut the size of clipart. 4 You can rotate clipart using , . Using drawpad 1 Touch from editing screen. 2 Touch to select shape. 3 Also set colour and thickness. 4 You can erase the drawing you added using .
PAGE 165
ou Trimming the length of the video Adding a subtitle 1 Open the video you want to edit. 1 Select Edit and choose . 2 Touch and set the new start and end points touching again. 3 Touch Done or, alternatively, to return to the touch gallery and discard the changes. 2 Select Edit and select 3 4 Selecting Transition style 1 Select a transition style, and touch to preview. 2 Touch and drag the bar to adjust the duration time 3 Touch Done to save the transition.
PAGE 166
Your photos and videos M Adding edit effect You to a eas vid To tou Mu list you 1 Open the video you want to edit. Adding a dubbling to your video 1 Open the video you want to edit. 2 Select Edit and select . 3 Select an effect you want to add on the photo. 2 Select Edit and choose . 3 Touch Grabbing a Frame You can capture a picture from the video. 1 Open the video you want to edit. 2 Select Edit and select . 3 Play the the video and touch to capture the scene you want while the video is playing.
PAGE 167
r e ur the lay Multimedia You can store multimedia files to a memory card so you have easy access to all your image and video files. To access the Multimedia menu, select Gallery from touch Multimedia tab. You can open a list of catalog bar that store all your multimedia files. Note Please make sure you install a memory card on to the phone to save photo and access to all your pictures. Without a memory card, the phone will not show any photo or video at all. There are five catalog bar as below.
PAGE 168
Multimedia Timeline view Sending a video Cre GW620 Gallery provides timeline view of your photos and videos. From the left side of the screen, the date you had taken photos will be displayed from old to new. If you select a specific date, all the photos you had taken that day will be grouped in white background. 1 To send a video just long If y ima cre hav ind My images options menu Using an image Select a photo and long touch to check what options are available.
PAGE 169
ify r Creating a slide show Media Player If you want to view all the images on your phone, you can create a slide show to save you having to open and close each individual image. 1 Long touch a photo and select Slide show. The Media Player folder shows a list of videos you have downloaded or recorded on your phone. Watching a video 1 Select Media Player on the Multimedia tab. 2 Select a video to play.
PAGE 170
Multimedia Setting a ringtone Storyboard There are three options. 1 Lone key a music file from Music list or Media player, select Use as and set as ringtone from pop up options. 2 Recorde a voice memo using Voice recorder and set as ringtone. 3 Select from Settings - Sound & display -Phone ringtone. 1 Video editor 1 Touch then select Video 2 3 4 5 editor. 6 72 LG GW620 | User Guide Set BGM-Choose to add music into the storyboard or change the sound.
PAGE 171
d or You need to touch edit the video. first to Music Movie to e a as ed. e dd d. 1 Flip left and right to check the - Touch to mark all the files, but the maximum is 32 files. - Touch to unmark all the files 25/32 - It shows selected file number Touch to go to the next step. various style. For Music Movie, you can select only photos. - Go back to the Video editorv screen. - Show the style name and the description of it. - Preview the style. - Touch to select the Select photos.
PAGE 172
Multimedia 2 After you selected photos, 3 4 5 6 7 74 touch and proceed to the next step. - Touch to toggle to random mode. - Touch to toggel to original mode. - Touch to toggle to view mode. Touch to select all the photos and touch . Select the music and set it as the background music. Add movie title using qwerty key pad and save it. Touch to play the complete video file. Touch to save the video file you made.
PAGE 173
o. Playing a game 1 Touch Launch button to launch a game or an application. NOTE: Additional cost may occur when using this service if you download games or application with charge. NOTE: Java game and application installation are only possible through Web. Transferring files using USB mass storage To transfer file using UMS: 1 Connect GW620 with PC using USB cable. 2 Choose Settings - SD card & phone storage - activate Mass storage only. 3 From the status bar, drag USB icon.
PAGE 174
Multimedia Music Playing a song Your LG GW620 has a built-in music player that lets you play all your favourite tracks. To access the music player, touch . From here, you can access a number of folders: Artists - Browse your music collection by artist. Albums - Browse your music collection by album. Songs - Contains all the songs you have on your phone. Playlists - Contains the playlists you have created. 1 Select Music from the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Songs. 3 Select the song you want to play.
PAGE 175
ng. xt e d to e, Therefore, it may be necessary to obtain a permission or a license to reproduce or copy music. In some countires national law prohibits private copying of copyrighted material. Before downlading or copying the file, please check the national legislation of the applicable country concerning the use of such material. Using the radio Your LG GW620 has an built-in FM radio feature so you can tune into your favourite stations and listen on the move.
PAGE 176
Multimedia Go Listening to the radio 1 1 Select FM radio. 2 Touch the channel number of the station you would like to listen to. TIP! To improve radio reception, extend the headset cord, which functions as the radio aerial. Warning! If you connect the headset not specifically made for it to the phone, the radio reception can be interfered.
PAGE 177
Google Applications 1 Set up a Google account first. Gmail Enter your user name and password. 2 After sign in, Contacts, email and calendar on your Google account will automatically synchronize with GW620. Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail on your phone is automatically synchronized with your Gmailaccount on the web.The Inbox conversations list is your default Gmail view.
PAGE 178
Google Applications Ut Google Talk 7 If you would like to add a Set Google Talk is Google’s instant messaging program. It lets you communicate with other people who also use Google Talk. note to your event, touch Description and type in the details. 8 If you want to repeat the alarm, set Repetition and set reminders if necessary. 9 Touch Save to save the event in the calendar.
PAGE 179
e Utilities Setting your alarm 8 Touch and hold the clock on 1 Select Alarm Clock. 2 If you want add a new alarm, the screen, and you will see different types of clock. You can choose one of them 9 You can delete all alarms by pressing central menu key and Delete Alarm, All alarm screen displayed and select manually by touch and then press Delete Alarm at the top. et nt 3 ed me, ed. y. 4 5 6 7 touch Add alarm. There are some preset alarms, you can activate one of them.
PAGE 180
Utilities Quickoffice Voice recorder Se You can manage and view document files . Available files are pdf, doc, txt, xls and zip file. 1 Choose Memory card . You can see the files and folder list. 2 If you choose Recent documents, it will show you files you recently viewed. 3 Touch and hold any file, it will show Rename, Properties and Delete options. 4 Choose a file and press Menu key to open Open, Register, update, Properties and About options. According to file type, there are more options.
PAGE 181
ord es. e Sending the voice recording 1 Once you have finished recording, you can send the audio clip by touching Share. 2 The recording will be added to the message which you can write and send it as normal. g.
PAGE 182
The web Browser Using web tool bar Us Browser gives you a fast, fullcolour world of games, music, news, sport, entertainment and loads more, straight to your mobile phone. Wherever you are and whatever you’re into. Touch to open the toolbar. 1 Touch to refresh the web page. to go forward 2 Touch one page. to go backward 3 Touch one page. to Add/Show 4 Touch Bookmark, Show history and Show most visited site. to open another 5 Touch web site with new window. to change 6 Touch browser settings.
PAGE 183
r. eb d r Using options Press Menu key to check options Go - Enter web address and go to that page Exit - Close Browser. Find on page. - Mark all letter you input Select text - Touch and line the sentences you want to copy. You can paste it every input box. Downloads - Show download history More y Bookmarks - Add/Show Bookmark, Show history and Show most visited site. y Window overview - Show all your open windows. y Page info - Show page information. y Share page - Send page by Email or Messaging.
PAGE 184
The web Se Changing web browser settings Pre set Me Select menu, select More and Settings or Touch using web tool bar Icon . You can change page layout (ex Text size, text encoding), change home page, control cache and cookie settings, security settings, and advanced settings. 86 LG GW620 | User Guide Wi At and mo WiWinot Blu Blu Na oth Mo for Air Air con NO inc to s off.
PAGE 185
Settings Press Menu key and select from settings. Or Touch Menu. Wireless Controls At here, you can manage Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. Also set airplane mode and mobile networks. Wi-Fi – Turn on Wi-Fi Wi-Fi settings – Set Network notification or add Wi-Fi network. Bluetooth – Turn on Bluetooth. Bluetooth settings - Set device Name & Discoverable, Scan for other devices. Mobile networks – Set options for roaming ,network and APNs. Airplane mode – After set Airplane mode, all wireless connection will be disabled.
PAGE 186
Settings Notification ringtone – Set default notification ringtone. Audible touch tones – Set to sound when you use dial pad. Audible selection – Set to sound when you make screen selection. Vibration feedback – Set to use vibration feedback. SD card notification- Disable SD card notification sounds. Display settings Orientation – Set to switch orientation automatically when you rotate phone. Animation - Set to show animation when you open or close windows.
PAGE 187
lt vel our e Applications You can manage applications and set up quick launch shortcuts. Unknown sources – Default setting to install of non-Market applications. Quick launch – Set keyboard shortcuts to launch applications. Choose to check default quick launch and set other quick launch. Manage applications - Manage and remove of installed applications. Development – Set options for application development like USB debugging, Stay awake, and Allow mock locations.
PAGE 188
Wi-Fi Wireless Manager allows you to manage Internet connections per Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) on your device. It allows the phone to connect to local wireless networks, or access the Internet wirelessly. Wi-Fi is faster and has a greater range than Bluetooth wireless technology and can be used for fast emailing and Internet browsing. NOTE: The GW620 supports WEP, WPA-PSK/2 security.
PAGE 189
gs n AP r o d r n as 2) Saving the frequently-used AP as a profile makes it easier to enter the Security key when connecting to an AP with that Security type. 3) If the AP does not support DHCP, you can connect to the AP using a static IP address. 2 Description of each field in the Wi-Fi profile. 1) Network name: SSID (ID) 2) Security type: WEP, WPAPSK/2 support. 3) Security key: saves the security key.
PAGE 190
Software Update Software Update LG Mobile Phone Software Update Program For more information on installing and using this program, please visit http://update. lgmobile.com. This feature allows you to update your software to the latest version quickly and conveniently over the Internet without needing to visit our service centre.
PAGE 191
ND: t ivX nt. de, o ess D. X® Accessories There are a variety of accessories available for your mobile phone, which may be sold separately. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Consult your local dealer for availability. (Items described below may be optional.) Charger Data cable Connect your GW620 and PC. Battery Stereo headset User Guide Learn more about your GW620. GW620 User Guide ENGLISH NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories.
PAGE 192
Accessories DivX VOD registration Generate a DivX VOD registration code. Please visit for registration and technical support.
PAGE 193
LG Electronics Inc. LG Twin Towers 20, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, Korea 150-721 GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GW620 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-01 V1.6.1, EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1, EN 301 489-19 V1.2.1, EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1, EN 300 328 V1.7.
PAGE 194
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model GW620 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
PAGE 195
Product care and maintenance g ) WARNING Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • • Do not disassemble this unit. • is Y4 kg e ns • Switch off the phone in any • • • • Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios, and personal computers.
PAGE 196
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Do not keep the phone next • Some hearing aids might be •W to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips. • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone. • Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture. • Use the accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. disturbed by mobile phones. • Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs, etc.
PAGE 197
. ct s n ne . nd • When your vehicle is equipped Glass Parts with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due to improper performance. • If you are listening to music whilst out and about, please ensure that the volume is at a reasonable level so that you are aware of your surroundings. This is particularly imperative when near roads. Some parts of your mobile device are made of glass.
PAGE 198
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Do not transport or store flammable gas, liquid, or explosives in the same compartment of your vehicle as your mobile phone and accessories. In aircraft Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. • Turn your mobile phone off or activate flight mode before boarding any aircraft. • Do not use it on the ground without permission from the crew. Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children.
PAGE 199
• Replace the battery when it ld • • ely - he • • • no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing. Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability. Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity, such as in the bathroom. Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places, this may deteriorate the battery performance.
PAGE 200
Trouble Shooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy for you to correct yourself. Message Possible causes Possible Solutions SIM error There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection Signal weak Outside GSM network area Move towards a window or into an open area.
PAGE 201
er, er Message Possible causes Phone cannot be switched on On/Off key not pressed long enough Battery empty Battery contacts dirty Press the On/Off key down for at least two seconds. Battery totally empty Charge battery. Temperature out of range Make sure the ambient temperature is right, wait for a while, and then charge again. Contact problem Check the power supply and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts and clean them if necessary.
PAGE 202
Trouble Shooting Message Possible causes Possible Solutions Number not permitted The Fixed dial number function is on. Check settings.